2016 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual - Dealer E

2016 Dodge Charger Owner`s Manual - Dealer E
Charger
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .19
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Remote Start Abort Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ Cancel Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .99
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .62
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the engine START/STOP button and
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
push to operate the ignition.
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are: OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START. During start,
ON/RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
1
—
OFF
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
When opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in
ACC or ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to
remind you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the
chime, the ignition or accessory on message will display
in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
Emergency Key Removal
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove
the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition in the
OFF position and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
SENTRY KEY
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorFrequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
or unlocked.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
Replacement Keys
as possible by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
CAUTION!
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Customer Key Programming
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
rized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
is one that has never been programmed.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer Sysincluding interference that may cause undesired optem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the
eration.
authorized dealer.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is placed in the “OFF”
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for
And Operating⬙ for further information).
door locks and trunk release are disabled. If something
• Make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the following audible and visible signals: the horn 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
vehicle:
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
will flash.
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Rearming Of The System
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in
off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds between cycles, up to 8
⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
cycles if the trigger remains active and then the Vehicle
further information).
Security Alarm will rearm itself.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry NOTE:
(RKE) transmitter.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
3. If any doors are open, close them.
Security Alarm.
To Disarm The System
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
the following methods:
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
information.
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go START/STOP button
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
Security System Manual Override
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
Tamper Alert
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
(extreme bottom position).
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
doors or open any door.
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
outside mirrors (if equipped).
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above To Unlock The Doors
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit- Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the Sound Horn With Lock
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “UnderThis feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
Headlight Illumination On Approach
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles To Unlatch The Trunk
equipped through Uconnect. To change the current setPush the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
ting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
To Lock The Doors
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless performed at an authorized dealer.
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Transmitter Battery Replacement
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
(24 km/h) or greater.
battery.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Using The Panic Alarm
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
2
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
Emergency Key Removal
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
shown in step #2 for removal.
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
General Information
maintaining security. The system has a range of
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
How To Use Remote Start
WARNING!
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
The following messages will display in the instrument
• System not disabled from previous remote start event cluster if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote
start prematurely:
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
NOTE:
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and
then shut down 10 seconds later.
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The instrument cluster message stays active until the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
Push and release the REMOTE START button
in the Remote Start mode.
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking • The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be
lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
(or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
cycle.
third cycle.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless EnterN-Go feature, the message “Remote start active - Push
start button” will display in the Driver Information
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
Display (DID) until you push the START button.
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
Cancel Remote Start
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote occur:
Start request.
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• Any engine warning lights come on.
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the • Low Fuel Light turns on.
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the • The hood is opened.
door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, • The hazard switch is pushed.
push and release the START/STOP button.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• The brake pedal is pushed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
DOOR LOCKS
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Manual Door Locks
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door
is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents
you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Placing the ignition in the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 MPH (24 km/h).
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by
your authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission is placed in
PARK.
3. The driver door is opened.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with passive entry.
There are three situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
search in any passive entry vehicle.
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati- 1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitter while a door is open.
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
3. A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
the door is open.
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
Transmitter In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
finds a Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside the car, and
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a it does not find any Passive Entry RKE transmitters
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the outside the car, the car will unlock and alert the customer.
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition is in the
OFF position.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
Trunk Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
To Enter The Trunk
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch unless
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit(1.5 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
ters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
of the deck lid.
deck lid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
2
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
General Information
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
The following regulatory statement applies to all radio
frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
2. This device must accept any interference received,
transmitter battery is dead.
including interference that may cause undesired opThe vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
eration.
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
vehicle’s interior door panel.
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS
Power Window Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release it when you want the window
The driver door power window switch and some model to stop.
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Push the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
AUTO-Down Feature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
NOTE:
Reset Auto-Up
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window 1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
switch again to close the window.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoadditional two seconds after the window is closed.
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
WARNING!
after the window is fully open.
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
Trunk Release Button
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
WARNING!
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
With the ignition in the OFF position , the Trunk Open either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be opened by actuating the glow-in-the-dark
handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
shoulder belts properly.
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
Air Bags room to inflate.
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilside air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
dren who do not use child restraints or beltbetween occupants and the door and occupants could
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
be injured.
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
them or under their arm.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even Initial Indication
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermithappen far away from home or on your own street.
tent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un- belts are buckled again.
buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
vating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.
A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear
the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortthe latch plate.
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
shoulder belt.
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180
degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above
the latch plate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Air Bag System Components
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags
system components:
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Air Bag Warning Light
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Instrument Panel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver Knee Air
Bag
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
WARNING!
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column. The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
provides enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the Supplemental Side Air Bags
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags.
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
WARNING!
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover
events, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the
injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and
body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
WARNING! (Continued)
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
Bags
work
with your seat belt to restrain you
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
properly.
In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
deploy
at
all.
Always wear your seat belt even
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
though
you
have
Side Air Bags.
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
WARNING!
Side Impacts
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
(Continued)
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in
determining the appropriate response to impact events.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the
vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,
on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a
near rollover event.
Rollover Events
If A Deployment Occurs
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. or all of the following may occur:
The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
event may be in progress and whether deployment is • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deor gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal bags will not be in place to protect you.
quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your
WARNING!
doctor immediately.
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immebag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye System serviced as well.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation NOTE:
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inbut they will open during air bag deployment.
structions for cleaning.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Enhanced Accident Response System
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
In the event of an impact, if the communication network Procedure
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys- changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
tem perform the following functions:
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or and starting the engine.
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
Air Bag Warning Light
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
button.
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
the battery has power.
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
• Unlock the power door locks.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
eight-second interval.
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malremains on while driving.
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
again after initial startup.
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protecThe ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncsystem immediately.
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected,
which could affect the Supplemental Restraint
System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a times, including babies and children.
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- province, requires that small children ride in proper
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosare recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- ecuted for ignoring it.
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
crash investigation.
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is the rear seats rather than in the front.
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For
additional
information,
refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
to
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetychildren from newborn size to the child almost large
index-53.htm
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child
Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a
Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
weight + weight of the child rethe combined weight of the child and the
straint) for using the LATCH anchild restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
chorage system to attach the child
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
restraint?
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
the seat belt be used together to
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be atNo
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
tached using a common lower
LATCH anchorage?
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
touch the back of the front passenfront passenger seat if the child restraint
ger seat?
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be reYes
Center position only may be removed.
moved?
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
2
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacrestraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
turer’s instructions.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
to allow more room for the child seat.
in any direction.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatWhen using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
tions to attach a tether anchor.
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
2
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
weight + weight of the child reusing the seat belt to install a forstraint) for using the Tether Anchor
ward facing child restraint, up to
with the seat belt to attach a forthe recommended weight limit of
ward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
Yes
Contact between the front passentouch the back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is
ger seat?
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be reYes
Center Only may be removed.
moved?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
tighten the seat belt against the belt
seating position with an ALR repath of the child restraint?
tractor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webrear-most position to make room for the child seat.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
more room for the child seat.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
vehicle seat.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
“click.”
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
against the child seat.
attach a tether anchor.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
WARNING! (Continued)
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
2
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child 2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head
restraint.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Center Tether Attachment
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the center tether anchorage located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “MainteA long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.”
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
vehicle.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 MPH (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
the break in period. Add oil as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
will turn on for four to
The Air Bag warning light
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault
is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
WARNING!
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
Vehicle” for further information.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
Defroster
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover•
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
prevent them from moving and interfering with the
the air directed against the windshield. See your authopedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
Floor Mat Safety Information
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .112
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .113
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of
Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .121
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .136 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . .140
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .155
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .148
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles . . . . . . . .167
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .161
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .168
䡵 MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .165
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .173
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .182
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .183
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .188
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
▫ ACC Operation At Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .195
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .196
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .199
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed
Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
䡵 FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
WITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .207
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Changing FCW And Active Braking Status. . . .210
▫ FCW Limited Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
䡵 LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ LaneSense Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .225
▫ Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF. . . . . . . . . . . .212 䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
▫ LaneSense Warning Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Changing LaneSense Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .230
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .232
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .233
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .237
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Relearn Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .245
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .241 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
䡵 LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .255
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right
for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
• The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- a 9-1-1 button.
ment Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ASSIST Call
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
features.
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
vehicle issues.
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
operator:
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
• The vehicle brand.
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
9-1-1 Call
Rearview Mirror or push the cancellation button on the
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
additional help is needed.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1
operator may be able to open a voice connection with
the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.
Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other vehicle
occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the
9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
• The Device Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors • Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion.
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the • Weather.
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
limited to, the following factors:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) or
3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can
prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call.
Operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS
signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to
function properly.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. lane next to your vehicle.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
General Information
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
forward, full rearward and normal.
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
the doors.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Power Mirrors
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the door trim panel.
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Mirror Control
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but- Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
the mirror that you want to adjust.
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indi- automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
cating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.
3
Slide-On-Rod Feature
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
when the vehicle is in PARK.
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
BSM Warning Light
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are Entering From The Side
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
contamination so that the BSM system can function
side of the vehicle.
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Side Monitoring
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Overtaking/Approaching
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Opposing Traffic
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where the
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
WARNING!
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
Rear Cross Path (RCP) is not a Back Up Aid system.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
It is intended to be used to help a driver detect an system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
must be careful when backing up, even when using alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approvolume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
the RCP state always requests the chime.
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime Blind Spot Alert Off
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de- When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
tected object are present on the same side at the same visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In systems.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
be reduced.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
NOTE:
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM used.
system, the radio volume is reduced.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
General Information
SEATS
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications vehicle.
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
WARNING!
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Reclining The Seatback
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator arrows in touchscreen buttons indicate the level
of heat in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for
HI, one for LO and none for OFF.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
once to turn the HI
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Press the heated seat button
the LO setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programmed to come on during a
remote start.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min- system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after apWARNING!
proximately 45 minutes.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
NOTE:
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
two to five minutes.
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
operate.
long periods of time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Rear Heated Seats
You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. The
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
LO and none for OFF.
• Push the heated seat button
heating.
once to select HI-level
• Push the heated seat button
LO-level heating.
a second time to select
• Push the heated seat button
a third time to turn
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
the heating elements OFF.
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console. There NOTE:
that allow the rear
are two heated seat switches
• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
passengers to operate the seats independently.
two to five minutes.
• The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
a second time to
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto- • Press the ventilated seat button
choose LO.
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to
illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating
turn the ventilated seat OFF.
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatiNOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
cally after approximately 45 minutes.
seats to operate.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment and move On models that are equipped with remote start, the
air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a
keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher remote start.
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
HI and LO.
system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
within the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the
control buttons through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
• Press the ventilated seat button
once to choose HI.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Manual Seats — If Equipped
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the position
desired. Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
3
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Manual Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Head Restraints
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE: Do not reverse the head restraints (making the NOTE: To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an attempt to can go then push the release button and the adjustment
gain additional clearance to the back of your head.
button at the base of each post while pulling the head
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push downward. Then
adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.
Adjustment Button
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Reactive
Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with
the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
3
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
NOTE:
• The head restraint should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If the center
rear head restraints requires removal, see your authorized dealer.
• The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Rear Seatback Loop
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Folded Rear Seatback
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pushed.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters, one RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
Memory Seat Switches
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
existing profile from memory.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Place the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position. • To set a memory profile to your RKE transmitter, refer
to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferTransmitter To Memory” in this section.
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
Transmitter To Memory
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
Push and release the SET (S) button on the memory
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the
switch.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
Within five seconds, push and release the MEMORY
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
button 1 or 2. The Drivers Information Display (DID)
must select the “Memory To FOB” or “Personal Settings
will display which memory position has been set.
Linked To Fob” feature through the Uconnect system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the follow- NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked from your
ing:
memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and
within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK
1. Place the vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
button on the RKE transmitter.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
Memory Position Recall
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
the system to complete the memory recall before NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
continuing to Step 3.
in PARK, a message will display in the Drivers InformaNOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer
tion Display (DID).
to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ in this section for
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, push
instructions on how to set a memory profile.
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push memory position 1.
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the Drivers Infor- NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
mation Display (DID).
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE trans- position 1.
mitter within 10 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, push MEMORY The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
button number 2 on the driver’s door or the UNLOCK you have the driver seat positioned when you cycle the
button on the RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2. vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the • When you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF
position, the driver seat will move about 2.4 inches (60
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
mm) rearward if the driver seat position is greater than
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
position 2.
stop. The seat will return to its previously set position
A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY
when you cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ACC or
buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during a recall.
RUN position.
When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steer- • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
ing column (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one
driver seat position is less than 0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm)
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
or Easy Entry.
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
Entry and Easy Exit position.
vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the front of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
3. Reach under the center front edge of the hood and
push and hold the safety catch lever to the left.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)
and drop the hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Safety Catch Lever Location
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
4. Lift the hood upward to the open position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
this feature.
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic information.
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
position.
Equipped
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
will come on in the automatic mode.
provides increased forward lighting at night by automatHeadlights On With Wipers (Available With
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
Automatic Headlights Only)
mounted on the windshield. This camera detects vehicle
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on specific light and automatically switches from high
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature of view.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To Activate
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
ment Panel” for further information.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera To Deactivate
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
If the windshield or forward facing camera module is
in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal
replaced, the camera must be re-calibrated to ensure
operation of low beams).
proper system performance. See your local authorized
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the
dealer.
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further infor up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
formation.
unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
Headlight Time Delay
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
when the headlight switch is turned off.
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
engine is shut Off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will Panel” for further information.
turn off in the normal manner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and push the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
push the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
3
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Lane Change Assist
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi released.
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
will shut off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilsecond time.
ity of the floor and center console area.
Courtesy Lights
Ambient Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Interior Lights
Dimmer Controls
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
3
Dimmer Controls
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Intermittent Wiper System
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: The heated washer nozzles only apply heat to the
nozzle outlets to prevent them from freezing and allow
the nozzles to dispense windshield washer fluid. Always
remove any buildup of snow or ice in front of the washer
nozzles as this will prevent the windshield washer fluid
from reaching the windshield.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
This feature utilizes a heating element to thaw out any ice mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
buildup that could occur at the outlets or within the continue to operate until you release the multifunction
windshield washer nozzles. To activate, push the rear lever.
window defroster button. When the rear window de- NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
froster times out, the heating element will also shut off. If pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
required, to reactivate the heated nozzles push the rear windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
window defroster button as needed.
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Heated Windshield Washer Nozzles
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear selector is
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windmoved out of the NEUTRAL position.
shield.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informamay reduce Rain Sensing performance.
tion.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
NOTE:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
downward. It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
the steering wheel at the end of the steering column.
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
3
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it can operate for up to
120 minutes before automatically shutting off. The heated
steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn on
when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located within
the Uconnect system. You can gain access to the control
button through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
turn the heating element ON.
once to
• Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
a second
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect system. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. If your vehicle is equipped with this
feature, it will allow you to adjust the brake and accelerator pedals toward or away from the driver to provide
improved position with the steering wheel.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
cushion side shield.
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Driver Information Display (DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted
when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal
Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
Adjustable Pedals Switch
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-)
button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has
been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control withspeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
out erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition U.S. Speed (mph)
To Deactivate
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
crease speed by pushing the SET + button.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Accelerate For Passing
U.S. Speed (mph)
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on EQUIPPED
moderate hills is normal.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
Control.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor and a forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed buttons. The two control modes function differently.
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a Always confirm which mode is selected.
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional
information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control Mode” in this section.
NOTE: Normal (fixed speed) electronic speed control
will not react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a target vehicle and hold the vehicle
for 2 seconds in the stop position. If the target
vehicle does not start moving within two seconds
the ACC system will display a message that the
system will release the brakes and that the
brakes must be applied manually. An audible
chime will sound when the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following To Activate/Deactivate
conditions:
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays
• When you apply the brakes.
“ACC Ready.”
• When the parking brake is set.
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
• When the brakes are overheated.
• When the driver door is open.
• When the driver seat belt is unbuckled.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
will display the set speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be defaulted to
20 mph (32 km/h). If the system is Set when the vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle •
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
•
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
•
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
•
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
•
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds.
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- • Driver door is opened at low speeds.
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
NOTE: If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer than
speed will only be determined by the position of the
two seconds, then the system will cancel and the brake
accelerator pedal.
force will be ramped-out. The driver will have to apply
To Cancel
the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
The following conditions cancel the system:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pushed.
To Resume
NOTE: ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary
vehicle in-front of your vehicle in close proximity.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
3
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the button
is pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance Setting
speed.
— Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer). • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The distance setting is changed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the DID is a warning for
capacity.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Speed (mph)
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a ve- • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
hicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
up to the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
This additional acceleration is triggered when the driver
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active when
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
passing on the left hand side.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
To Vary The Speed Setting
in the DID.
To Increase Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET + button.
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
in the DID.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The decrease in set speed is respeed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
flected in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
NOTE:
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • When you override and push the SET + button or SET
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
- buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
of the vehicle.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
button is released. The decrease in set speed is resufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
flected in the DID.
will automatically slow the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a target vehicle. If an ACC host vehicle
follows a target vehicle to a standstill, the host vehicle
will release the vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a full stop.
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
exceeds normal range (overheated).
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
while following a target vehicle, if the target vehicle starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, your vehicle will resume motion without the
need for any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the DID and produce a
warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at
this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release. A cancel message will display
on the DID and produce a warning chime. Driver intervention will be required at this moment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow
these warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
instrument cluster.
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status. The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of • System Cancel
the following displays in the DID:
• Driver Override
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• System Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap• ACC Proximity Warning
tive Cruise Control Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ACC Unavailable Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
five seconds of no ACC display activity
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
Display Warnings And Maintenance
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
this warning may temporarily occur.
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control is still available. For additional information refer
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/ examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
vehicle behind the lower grille.
system will deactivate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- NOTE:
tant to note the following maintenance items:
• If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
the sensor lens.
your authorized dealer.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and • Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recomrequire a sensor realignment.
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
ACC/FCW operation.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles. Do- The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
ing so could cause an ACC system failure or malfunction. Windshield” warning will display and also a chime will
indicate when conditions temporarily limit system perWhen the condition that deactivated the system is no
formance. This most often occurs at times of poor visibillonger present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
ity, such as in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
simply reactivating it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and
fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the DID will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded performance.
When the condition that created limited functionality is
no longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
Windshield” message can sometimes be displayed while other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW facing camera inspected at your authorized dealer.
system will recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
Under rare conditions, when the camera is not tracking
any vehicles or objects in its path this warning may If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailtemporarily occur.
able Service Required”, there may be an internal system
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC funcexamine the windshield and the camera located on the tionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
back side of the inside rear view mirror. They may normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
require cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
Offset Driving Condition Example
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
Turns
And
Bends
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume Using ACC On Hills
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
system functionality.
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
Turn Or Bend Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
3
Lane Changing Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
General Information
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency Mode
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- To change between the different control modes, push the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
eration of the device.
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed)
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pushing of the
other than an authorized service facility could void
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONauthorization to use this equipment.
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
KM) will appear indicating what speed was set. This light
will turn on when the electronic speed control is SET.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even if
you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither the
presence of the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to vehicle
distance is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always be
aware which mode is selected.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET +
button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderTo Set A Desired Speed
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
desired speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button U.S. Speed (mph)
and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed has • Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH/
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rein the DID display.
flected in the DID display.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set,
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pushing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • The gear selector is removed from the Drive position.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
To Resume Speed
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reTo resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
flected in the DID display.
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
To Cancel
20 mph (32 km/h).
The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
To Turn Off
Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory:
memory if:
• The brake pedal is applied.
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
• The CANCEL button is pushed.
ON/OFF button is pushed.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- • The ignition is turned off.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
pushed.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) WITH
MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation
Operation
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system with
mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings,
visual warnings (within the DID), and may apply a brake
jerk to warn the driver when it detects a potential frontal
collision. The warnings and limited braking are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
(EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
visual warnings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon these progressive warnings, then the system will provide a limited
level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver
reacts to the warnings by braking and the system determines that the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake force, the
system will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required. If a Forward Collision Warning with
Mitigation event begins at a speed below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the system may provide the maximum or
partial braking to mitigate the potential forward collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 1 mph
(2 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
FCW Message
• It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within an ignition cycle, the Active Braking portion of
FCW will be deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle • The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
message will be deactivated.
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
To turn the FCW system back ON, push the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
Changing the Active Braking status to “Off” prevents the
system from providing limited autonomous braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF,
vehicle in front of you.
it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
The forward collision button is located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
To turn the FCW system OFF, push the forward collision
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Changing FCW And Active Braking Status
The FCW Sensitivity And Active Braking Settings are • The system will retain the last setting selected by the
programmable through the Uconnect System. Refer to
driver after ignition shut down.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
Panel” for further information.
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting and the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
Active Braking is the “On” setting, this allows the system
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
to warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in
higher rate of speed.
front of you when you are farther away and it applies
limited braking. This gives you the most reaction time to • FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
FCW Limited Warning
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
If the DID displays “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality”
or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition that limits
FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable
under normal conditions, the active braking may not be
fully available. Once the condition that limited the system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). The
LaneSense system uses a forward looking camera to
detect lane markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a haptic warnService FCW Warning
ing in the form of torque applied to the steering wheel to
If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
prompt the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift out of the
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
lane, the LaneSense system provides a visual warning
• Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
through the Driver Information Display (DID) to prompt
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although the driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
applying torque into the steering wheel at any time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When only a single lane marking is detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a
visual warning through the DID to prompt the driver to
remain within the lane. When only a single lane marking
is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
Turning LaneSense ON Or OFF
The default status of LaneSense is “OFF”.
The LaneSense button is located on the center stack
below the Uconnect display.
To turn the LaneSense system ON, push the
LaneSense button to turn the system ON (LED
turns
off).
A “Lane Sense On” message is shown in the
NOTE: When operating conditions have been met, the
DID.
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are
on the steering wheel and provides an audible warning To turn the LaneSense system OFF, push the LaneSense
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on button once to turn the system OFF (LED turns on).
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
NOTE: The LaneSense system will retain the last system
does not return their hands to the wheel.
state ON or OFF from the last ignition cycle when the
ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the Driver Information Display (DID).
7.0 Driver Information Display (DID) Screen — If
Equipped
3
When the LaneSense system is ON; the lane lines are gray
when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected
and the LaneSense indicator is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines/White Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense
indicator is solid white when only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the DID if an unintentional
lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin
line remains solid yellow and the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only the right
lane marking has been detected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is ON, the lane lines turn
from gray to white to indicate that both of the lane
markings have been detected. The LaneSense indicator
is solid green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to provide visual
warnings in the DID and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
3
Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Indicator)
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the left thick lane line and left thin line turn solid
yellow. The LaneSense indicator changes from solid
green to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to
the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the • When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
steering wheel will turn to the right.
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left thick lane line flashes yellow (on/off) and the left
thin line remains solid yellow. The LaneSense indicator
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
• For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Indicator)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system settings can be configured
through the Uconnect system screen.
Follow these steps to change the LaneSense settings:
1. Press the “Controls” button on touchscreen located on
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Settings” button.
3. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button.
When in the Safety & Driving Assistance screen, you can
configure the intensity of the torque warning and the
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) through the personYellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Indicator)
NOTE: The LaneSense system operates with the similar alization settings.
behavior for a right lane departure.
NOTE:
• When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector
• The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
whenever a safety system engages. (anti-lock brakes,
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
traction control system, electronic stability control,
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
forward collision warning, etc.)
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
ParkSense Sensors
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
and audible indications of the distance between the rear bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79
Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
system and recommendations.
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or orientation of the obstacle.
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
ParkSense Warning Display
ParkSense Display
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if When the vehicle is in REVERSE and an obstacle has
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect System. been detected, the warning display will turn ON indicatRefer to ⬙Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your ing the system status.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual distance and location relative to the vehicle.
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region,
the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or
right rear region and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show
the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the sound
tone will change from fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
3
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
Slow
Slow
(for rear
(for rear
center
center
only)
only)
None
None
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Greater than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
Arc —
Left Rear
Arc —
Center Rear
Arc —
Right Rear
Radio
Volume
Reduced
None
79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
Single 1/2Second Tone
(for rear
center only)
None
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
None
None
None
None
3rd Flashing
None
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
None
Fast
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
Yes
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Continuous
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
1st
Flashing
Yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
When the ParkSense system is disabled, the
Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approxiParkSense switch, located on the switch panel below the
mately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers InformaUconnect display.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is
disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be
OFF when the system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch
is pushed and the system is disabled or requires service,
the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily and
then the LED will be ON.
ParkSense Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS”
or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Panel” for further information.
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damInformation Display (DID) will display the
age the sensors.
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
• ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio when it
is sounding an audio tone.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense or render the
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
system temporarily unavailable.
bumper.
• When you turn ParkSense off in DRIVE, the instrument cluster will display ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ for five • Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle
12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
the ignition.
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
position and ParkSense is turned off, the Driver Informessage to be displayed in the Driver Information
mation Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE OFF”
Display (DID).
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen ⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The ParkView When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
license plate. The image will be displayed in the touch- last touchscreen appears again.
screen display along with a caution note to “check entire
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the
surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its
seconds this note will disappear.
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has pro- position. The active guide lines will show separate zones
grammable modes of operation that may be selected that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set- vehicle.
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
further information.
the vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable
to view every obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
3
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, push the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pushing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pushed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, push the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicle’s battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The HomeLink indicator is
located above the center button.
Overhead Console HomeLink Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
Alarm is active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
NOTE:
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the Homelink button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
transmitter button.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indirelease the button.
cator light. The Homelink indicator will flash slowly
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programand then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Resteps.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 NOTE:
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programprogram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
in view.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the sunroof switch is
pushed again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Push the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPush the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will stop the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open.” During Express Open operation, any other actuaTo close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the
tion of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
Venting Sunroof — Express
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Push and release the Vent button within one half second open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurand the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
other actuation of the switch will stop the sunroof.
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Relearn Procedure
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean For vehicles equipped with a sunroof, there is a relearn
the glass panel.
procedure that allows you to calibrate the sunroof when
the “Auto Up” feature stops working. To reset the
Ignition Off Operation
sunroof, follow these steps:
NOTE:
1. Set the ignition to the ACC ON/RUN position.
• The power sunroof switch can remain active in Acces2. Ensure that the sunroof is in the Fully Closed position.
sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after
the vehicles ignition is placed to the Off position. 3. Press and hold the Close switch. The sunroof will hit
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
the hard stop and move to the Vent position after 10
seconds.
• This feature is programmable using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understand- 4. Release the Close switch, then press and hold the
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Close switch again within 5 seconds to begin the
teaching process. The sunroof will complete one full
cycle and return to the Fully Closed position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
NOTE: If the Close switch is released anytime during the NOTE:
teach cycle, the procedure will need to be repeated
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
starting from the first step.
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
5. Once the sunroof has stopped in the Fully Closed
discharge.
position, release the Close switch. The sunroof is now
reset and ready to use.
• To ensure proper cigar lighter operation, a MOPAR
knob and element must be used.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with one 12 Volt (13 Amp) The front power outlet is located inside the storage area
power outlet on the instrument panel and one 12 Volt (10 on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Amp) power outlet in the center console that can be used
to power cellular phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power outlets are
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled
with a “key” are powered when the ignition switch is in
the ON or ACC position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Center Console Power Outlet
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
NOTE: If the Media Hub is in use, do not exceed the
maximum power of 100 Watts (8 Amps) for the center
console power outlet. When the Media Hub is not in use,
the outlet can deliver up to 160 Watts (13 Amps). If the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system NOTE: The instrument panel power outlet and dual rear
will need to be replaced.
console USB ports can be changed to “battery” powered
all the time by moving the #12 20 Amp fuse from “IGN”
to “B+”. Refer to “Rear Power Distribution Center
Cover” in “Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)”.
WARNING!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet/
Dual USB Charge Only Ports
2 — #38 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Center Console Power Outlet/
Media Hub
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
3
Front Cupholders
Retractable Cover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
STORAGE
Console Features
Glove Compartment
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the gear
selector.
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
Two separate storage compartments are also located
of the instrument panel.
underneath the center console armrest.
Glove Compartment
Center Console
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable Door Storage
upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on The door panels contain storage areas.
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
small items and handheld devices. Below the upper tray,
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 Volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Door Trim Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Push this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
push the button a second time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
to complete depending on road surface conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .260 䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .296
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM . . . . . .264
▫ Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .266
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 5.0 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED. . . .342
▫ PERFORMANCE CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .360
䡵 AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .378
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . .
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
QUICK TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . . . .382
. . . . . . . .382
. . . . . . . .382
. . . . . . . .384
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .401
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio Controls
— Uconnect System
— Climate Control Hard Controls
6 — Glove Box
7 — Power Outlet
8 — Ignition Start/Stop Button
9 — Trunk Release Button
10 — Headlight Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
4
Instrument Cluster For 3.6L and 5.7L
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Temperature Gauge
1. Tachometer
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temshows the Driver Information Display (DID) mesperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furallowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
ther information.
operating range.
3. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the fuel is located.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
Instrument Cluster For 6.4L
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
5. Temperature Gauge
1. Tachometer
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
perature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
2. Driver Information Display (DID) Display
satisfactorily.
• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temshows the Driver Information Display (DID) mesperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain
sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for furallowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
ther information.
operating range.
3. Speedometer
CAUTION!
• Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to
the side of the vehicle where the fuel is located.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“260” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
CAUTION! (Continued)
remains on the “260” and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light
has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
the brake fluid level checked.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
upper limit, a continuous chime will be sound for 4 minutes or until the engine is allowed to
cool whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature
reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to
“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system
or a related component.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with
severe usage. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, place the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle speed or apply light foot pressure to increase
the engine speed RPM until the Transmission Temperature light turns off.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving, there a single chime will sound.
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 MPH (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
(Continued)
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service AWD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required. Contact your authorized dealership.
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Service Forward Collision Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on when there is a fault in the Forward Collision Warning system.
Contact your authorized dealership.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with visual and steering torque warnings when
the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow.
• When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green to flashing
yellow.
Refer to “LaneSense - If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Failure Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the LaneSense system is not operating and needs service.
Please see your authorized dealer.
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control Alert Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the ACC is not operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” to provide visual warnings in the EVIC/DID and a torque warning
in the steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If
Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Blue Telltale Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
White Telltale Indicator Lights
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, the LaneSense indicator is solid white when only the left
lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide visual warnings in the
instrument cluster display if an unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense —
If Equipped⬙ in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the adaptive cruise control is ON, but not set.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the adaptive cruise control is ON and SET to a specified speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
The Driver Information Display (DID) features an inter- variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
active display which is located in the instrument cluster. buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The
DID Menu Items consists of the following:
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance — If Equipped
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
Driver Information Display (DID) Display
• Screen Setup
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
The system allows the driver to select information by UP And DOWN Arrow Buttons:
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Using the UP or DOWN arrows allows you to
wheel:
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Changes the Main Screen area and Menu Title
area.
LEFT And RIGHT Arrow Buttons:
Using the LEFT or RIGHT arrow buttons
allows you to cycle through the submenu items
of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
DID Controls
• Holding the UP/DOWN or LEFT/RIGHT
arrow buttons will loop the user through the
currently selected menu or options presented on the screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
arrow button will exit each
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous • Pushing the LEFT
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
scrolling.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new Perforscreen viewed within that main menu will be displayed. mance Timers):
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK
button.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
Engine Oil Life Reset
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus. indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
and DOWN will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
• Within each submenu layer, the UP
arrows will allow the user to select the item of chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
interest.
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
• Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to driving style.
the 1st page of the submenu).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To procedure(s):
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
OK or arrow buttons. To reset the oil change indicator
START/STOP button and place the ignition in the
system (after performing the scheduled maintenance),
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
refer to the following procedure.
2. Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
scroll downward through the main menu to “VeYour vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
hicle Info.”
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
3. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system 4. Push and hold the OK button to rest oil life. If
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
conditions are met, the gauge and numeric display
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
will update to show 100%. If conditions are not met a
driving style.
popup message of ⬙To reset oil life engine must be off
with ignition in run⬙ will be displayed (for 5 seconds),
and the user will remain at the Oil Life screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
or DOWN
5. Push and release the UP
button to exit the submenu screen.
arrow
Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped
The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
the DID display when the driver configured gear shift
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE This indication notifies the driver to change gear correSTART/STOP button and place the ignition to the sponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
within 10 seconds.
The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Your Instrument Panel” for further information on enabling,
disabling, and configuring the Performance Shift Indicator.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Cruise Control
DID Selectable Menu Items
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tell- Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow buttales. These telltales include:
tons until the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
• Cruise Ready
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate
that the Cruise Control system is activated.
Speedometer
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until
the
Speedometer
menu
is
displayed
in the DID.
• Electronic Speed Control SET
or RIGHT
arrow
Push and release the LEFT
This telltale will illuminate green when the
button to change the speedometer type (Analog or
electronic speed control is SET. Refer to “ElecDigital). Push and release the OK button to toggle
tronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The
units (km/h or MPH) of the speedometer.
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu is displayed in the DID.
arrow button to enter
Push and release the RIGHT
the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following
Vehicle Info submenu items:
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the DID.
• Tire Pressure Monitor
• Coolant Temp
• Trans Temp
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
the following displays in the DID:
• Oil Temp
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Life
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
• Battery Voltage
• AWD Status — If Equipped
• Engine Hours Idle Hours — If Equipped
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• ACC Proximity Warning
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has • ACC Unavailable Warning
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
Control Ready.”
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Conwheel) and the following will display in the DID:
trol (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
ACC SET
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the LaneSense — If Equipped
instrument cluster.
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC The information displayed depends on LaneSense sysactivity occurs, which may include any of the following: tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped”
• Distance Setting Change
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• System Cancel
• Driver Override
• System Off
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Menu item is displayed in the until the Trip Menu item is displayed in the EVIC.
or RIGHT
arrow button to
DID.
Toggle the LEFT
select Trip A or Trip B. The Trip information will
• Two submenu pages one with Current value (instandisplay the following:
taneous calculation of the fuel economy) displayed
and one without the Current Value displayed (toggle • Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km) traveled
for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
left or right to select one):
– Current Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l) • Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average fuel
– Range To Empty (miles or km)
economy (MPG or L/100 km) of Trip A or Trip B since
the last reset.
– Average Fuel Economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/l)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the • Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of travel
particular engine requirements
since the last reset.
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
• Hold the OK button to reset average fuel economy
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Audio
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is displayed in the DID.
This feature shows the number of stored warning
or LEFT
messages, if any. Pushing the RIGHT
arrow button will allow you to scroll through the
stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP
or DOWN
arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus. The
Screen Setup feature allows you to change what
information is displayed in the instrument cluster as
well as the location that information is displayed.
1. Upper Left
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty (default)
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
2. Upper Right
• Compass
• Outside Temp (default)
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• None
3. Center
• Menu Title (default)
• Compass
• Outside Temp.
• Time
• Range to Empty
• Average L/100km (or MPG)
• Current L/100km (or MPG)
• Trip A Distance
• Trip B Distance
• Audio Inform
• Digital Speed
• None
4. Gear Display
• Full (default)
• Single
5. Current Gear
• On
• Off (default)
6. Odometer
• Show (default)
• Hide
7. Restore Default
• Ok
• Cancel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
installed.
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in
WARNING!
your vehicle to function properly.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
may result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All
About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio
NOTE:
Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” in your
Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
4
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing
so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Your Uconnect system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
5.0 Settings
Push the + MORE button on the faceplate and then press
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety/
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort,
Engine Off Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, select the preferred setting option. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow/Done
button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the
faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
Display
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
the following settings will be available:
• Display Mode
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual
display settings. To change Mode status, press and retime.
lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Language
Units
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button
on the touchscreen and select from “English,” “Français,”
or “Español.”
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
• Touchscreen Beep
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the • Distance
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To
change the Mode status, press and release the “On” or Select from: “mi” or “km.”
“Off” button on the touchscreen.
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• Temperature
• Show Command List
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the mode status, press and
release the “Always,” “With Help,” or “Never” button on
the touchscreen.
• Torque
Clock & Date
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Power
Voice
• Set Time and Format
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may set the time and format
manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from
• Voice Response Length
a 12 hour or 24 hour format. Press the corresponding
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then
sponse Length settings. To change mode status, press and select “AM” or “PM.”
release the “Brief” or “Long” button on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Show Time Status
adjust the steering effort and feel. Your vehicle will come
pre-set to the “Normal” steering setting. This setting proWhen in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
vides a balanced steering feel and steering effort. Press the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
“Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide an increased
Status setting press the “Show Time Status” button on the
amount of steering feel, requiring a higher amount of
touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
steering effort. Press the “Comfort” button on the touch• Set Date
screen to provide a lower steering effort.
When in this display, you may set the date manually. • ParkSense — If Equipped
Press the “Set Date” button on the touchscreen then press
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the
the corresponding arrows above and below the current
vehicle when the transmission shift lever/gear selector is
date to adjust.
in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
Safety/Assistance
(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual)
After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can
be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
change the ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
Only” or “Sound and Display” button. Refer to
When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume — If Equipped
disable, press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active
Guidelines” button on the touchscreen, and select “On”
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be seor “Off.”
lected from the Uconnect System — if equipped. The
chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and • ParkView Backup Camera Delay
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
To make your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol- delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the
ume” button on the touchscreen, then select from “Low,” navigation or audio screen appears again. When the ve“Med,” or “High.” ParkSense will retain its last known hicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
configuration state through ignition cycles.
ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever/gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio
touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After
five seconds, this note will disappear. To enable or
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of “REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the
ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the
ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the “Controls”
button on the touchscreen, the “settings” button on the
touchscreen, then the “Safety & Assistance” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup camera Delay”
button on the touchscreen and select from “ON” or “OFF.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Blind Spot Alert
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To enable or disable, press the
“Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, and select
“On” or “Off.”
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,
the following settings will be available:
• Headlight Off Delay
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time make your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button
and select from “On” or “Off.”
interval.
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on when the
doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “Illuminated Approach” button on the touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” buttons
on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, and select from “On” or “Off.”
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from
“On” or “Off.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Doors & Locks
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch- When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
screen, the following settings will be available:
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch• Auto Unlock On Exit
screen and select from “On” or “Off.”
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or • Remote Door Unlock
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To This feature will allow you to program your remote door
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit” locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with
button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To
• Sound Horn With Lock
make your selection, press the “Remote Door Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when button on the touchscreen and choose from “All” or
the door locks are activated. To make your selection, “Driver.”
press the “Horn w/Lock” Button and choose “Off,” “1st
NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the (RKE) transmitter
Press” or “2nd Press.”
will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all
doors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
Engine Off Options
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. It automatically
unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is
grabbed. To make your selection, press the “Passive
Entry” button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or
“Off.” Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights
w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from
“On” or “Off.”
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on
the touchscreen and select from “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”
buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time
interval.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status press the “Engine Off
Power Delay” button and select from “0 seconds,” “45
seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes” buttons on the
touchscreen.
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is being driven, illustrated in the zone map.
Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences when calibrated, and provide
the most accurate compass headings.
Compass Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
NOTE: Before compass calibration is performed, the
compass variance zone should be set for best results.
• Compass Variance
Press “Compass Variance” on the touchscreen to change
this setting. You will then be able to select a compass
variance of 1 through 15 per the compass variance zone
map figure.
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Compass Variance Zone Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
• Compass Calibration
Audio
Press “Compass Calibration” on the touchscreen to enter
calibration. To start calibration of the compass, press the
“YES” button on the touchscreen and complete one or
more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects). A message will appear on the touchscreen when the compass has been successfully calibrated.
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as Mobile Phones, Laptops and
Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is
located, and it can cause interference with the compass
sensor, and it may give false readings.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the
arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• Loudness — If Equipped
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touchscreen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on
the touchscreen.
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.
To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on
the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
Phone/Bluetooth
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. • Paired Phones
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level • Paired Audio Sources
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset” This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
button on the touchscreen, select “+” and “–.”
to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchthe screen or visit the provider online.
screen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
• Channel Skip
and is available for U.S. residents only.
SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable
channels while scanning. To make your selection, press
the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the Restore Settings
channels you would like to skip.
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
“Restore Settings” button and select from “Yes” or “No.”
If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select
to access the Subscription Information screen.
“Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Clear Personal Data
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on 8.4 Settings
Press the “Apps
” button, then press the “Settings”
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
button
on
the
touchscreen
to display the menu setting
• Clear Personal Data
screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal to access programmable features that may be
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove all equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On
button and select from “Yes” or “No.” If “Yes” is selected a Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear
all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Personal Data and System Information.
System Information
NOTE:
After pressing the “System Information” button on the • Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
touchscreen the following information will be available:
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings
• System Information
may vary.
When System Information is selected, a System Information
screen will appear displaying the system software version.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode, press and release the preferred setting “option”
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the “X”
button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or
down through the available settings.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
⬙parade⬙ positions.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness from (1–10) with
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen the “+” and “–” buttons on the touchscreen.
the following settings will be available:
NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with
• Display Mode
Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and
When in this display you may select one of the display the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or
mode settings. To change Mode status, press and release ⬙parade⬙ positions.
Display
the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Set Theme
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may select the theme for the
display screen. To make your selection, press the ⬙Set
Theme⬙ button on the touchscreen, then select the desired
theme option button until a check-mark appears showing
that the setting has been selected.
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the “Set Language”
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the language, showing that setting has
been selected.
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the “Control Screen
Time-Out” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
• Distance
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the Driver Information Display (DID) as
the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected.
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
Units
• Fuel Consumption
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
“km/L.”
• Pressure
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation • Power
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
measure are listed below:
• Torque
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice
Clock
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available:
following settings will be available:
• Voice Response Length
• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
• Show Command List
• Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Set Time Minutes
Safety & Driving Assistance
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down.
After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
button. For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features
Of Your Vehicle”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
(LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeThe FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
hicle”.
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient • LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
ABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning The amount of directional torque the steering system can
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a check- apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
had been selected. For further information, refer to
“Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation” in For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Vehicle”.
• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential When your vehicle is not equipped with Performance
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to Control, the Steering Feel Options feature will allow you
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning to adjust the steering effort and feel. Your vehicle will
come pre-set to the “Normal” steering setting. This
zone start point.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
setting provides a balanced steering feel and steering
effort. Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to
provide an increased amount of steering feel, requiring a
higher amount of steering effort. Press the “Comfort”
button on the touchscreen to provide a lower steering
effort.
“Sound and Display” button. Refer to “ParkSense” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• Rear ParkSense Volume
The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected from the DID or Uconnect System. The chime
• Paddle Shifters — If Equipped
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
When this feature is selected, the paddle shifters can be factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
enabled or disabled. Select the “Enable” or “Disable” your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense Vol.” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
button on the touchscreen.
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• ParkSense — If Equipped
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration state
The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the through ignition cycles.
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
ParkSense status, press and release the “Sound Only” or REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display
along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note
will disappear. To make your selection, press the
“ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
button on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
When this feature is selected and the wipers are on, the
system will automatically activate the windshield wipers
if it senses moisture on the windshield. To make your
selection, press the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, press
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
setting had been selected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Lights
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
following settings will be available.
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
• Headlight Off Delay
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” butis shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting, ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
your desired time interval, and choose either 0, 30, 60 or
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
90 seconds.
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conWhen this feature is selected, the headlights will activate ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
and remain on for 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds when the doors Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, selected. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped” in “Underpress the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further inforyour desired time interval.
mation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn on Lock” feature selected. To
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock” • 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
next to setting, showing that the setting has been seUnlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
lected.
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
• Sound Horn With Lock
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated with the RKE. To make your When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
selection, press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
Press” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
selected.
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is proWhen this feature is selected, the horn will sound when grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting, touching the handle more than once will result in only
showing that setting has been selected.
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/ “Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry — If Equipped
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob is set to
ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is
used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the
Starting Your Vehicle”.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob — If Equipped • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn
ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On Driver
Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start” or “All
Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5
• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
minutes” or “10 minutes.”
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will • Headlight Off Delay
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Audio
After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
following settings will be available.
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
• Balance/Fade
This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade • Surround Sound — If Equipped
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”
• Equalizer
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen.
• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Loudness — If Equipped
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchmake your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the screen, the following settings will be available:
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the • Channel Skip
setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
SiriusXM can be programmed to skip channels. To make
Phone/Bluetooth
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Subscription Information
• Paired Phones
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
This feature shows which phones are paired to the limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
• Paired Audio Sources
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the
to access the Subscription Information screen.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To Clear Personal Data
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
the screen or visit the provider online.
on the touchscreen the following settings will be availNOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription able:
and is available for U.S. residents only.
• Clear Personal Data
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to
their default settings. To restore the settings to their
default setting, press the “Restore Settings” button. A
pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to
reset your settings to default?” select “OK” to restore,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the settings are restored, a pop up appears stating
⬙Settings reset to default.⬙
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal
data including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to clear,
“Cancel” or “X” to exit without making changes. Once
the data has been cleared, a pop up appears stating
⬙Personal data cleared”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following information will be available:
button on the touchscreen to access that specific Performance Page.
WARNING!
• System Information
When System Information is selected, a System Information screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
PERFORMANCE PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators, as received from the
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
with the capabilities of your vehicle in real-time.
To access the Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen then press the “Performance
Pages” button on the touchscreen. Press the desired
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
The Performance Pages include the following:
Home
• Home
• Timers
• Gauges 1
4
• Gauges 2
• G-Force
• Engine
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Performance Pages — Home
When Home is selected, the following options will be
available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the
user.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll • Current
through vehicle images.
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
• A short-cut to the Performance Control feature.
• Last
Timers
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
Performance Pages — Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
• Save
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save to the jump drive.
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save
runs to the SD Card.
feature is listed below:
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
Performance Pages — Save
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated a drag strip timing light
(behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID).
• ¼ Mile (400 meter)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
(400 meters).
• Brake Distance
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛ and ¼ Mile timers stop.
will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h) NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released or the parking brake is engaged,
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
• Brake Speed
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to brake pedal is depressed.
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only display ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
MPH (48 km/h).
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ mile
(200 meters).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Gauges 1
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Gauges 2
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (Automatic Transmission)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
G-Force
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Acceleration and Braking
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Acceleration and Braking, Left and
Right
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
Charger Performance Pages — G-Force
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
they are cleared by the driver.
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Vehicle Speed
Engine
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
Performance Pages — Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
PERFORMANCE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Performance Control
feature which allows for coordinating the operation of
various vehicle systems depending upon the type of
driving behavior desired. The Performance Control feature is controlled through the Uconnect radio and may be
accessed by performing any of the following:
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual engine oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
• Pushing the Super Track Pack button on the instrument panel switch bank.
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the • Selecting “Performance Control” from the “Apps”
vehicle.
menu.
• Selecting “Performance Control” from within the Performance Pages menu.
You will be able to enable, disable, and customize the
functionality of the Launch Control and Drive Mode
Set-Up features within Performance Control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Descriptions of these features are provided below. To
access information about the functionality of these features through the Uconnect system, press the “Info”
button on the touchscreen.
Launch Mode
WARNING!
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
Launch Control
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The • Launch Control should only be used when the engine
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
and transmission are at operating temperature.
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
control resulting in an aborted launch.
recommended.
NOTE:
• Launch control should not be used on public roads.
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
area.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
of the vehicle’s life.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Drive Mode Set-Up
on the touchscreen, the driver can configure their individual drive modes and see how those configurations
affect the performance of the vehicle.
NOTE: Not all of the options listed in this manual are
available on every vehicle, below is a chart with all
available Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Available Mode Configurations
Transmission
Engine
Engine/Trans
Steering
Paddle Shifters
Traction Control
Drive Mode Set-Up
Auto
N/A
X
X
X
X
Pressing the “Drive Mode Set-Up” button on the touchscreen within the Performance Control screen indicates Refer to the Sport and Default modes for their detailed
the real-time status of the various systems. Pressing the operation.
“Sport Mode Set-Up” or “Default Mode Set-Up” buttons
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
NOTE: These settings will remain in effect when using the Engine, Transmission and Traction will operate in
their Normal settings and cannot be changed. The Steerthe Launch Control feature.
ing assist may be configured to Normal, Sport, or ComDefault Mode
fort by pressing the corresponding buttons on the touchscreen. The Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled
while in this mode.
Default Mode
The vehicle will always start in Default Mode. This mode
is for typical driving conditions. While in Default Mode,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Default Mode Set-Up
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Any of these four settings may be changed to the driver’s
preferences by pressing the buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the Sport button on the instrument panel switch
bank to put the vehicle in Sport Mode and activate these
settings. The customized settings will only be active
when the Sport button is active.
Sport Mode
Sport Mode
Sport Mode is a configuration set-up for typical enthusiast driving. The Transmission and Steering are both set to
their Sport settings. The steering wheel paddle switches
are enabled. The Traction Control defaults to Normal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Sport Mode Set-Up
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Possible Drive Mode configurations are listed below with Engine/Trans
accompanying descriptions. The information contained
in the list below can also be accessed from within the
mode Set-Up menus. To access the information, press the
“Info” button on the touchscreen from the mode Set-Up
menu, and use the left/right arrows to toggle through
available descriptions. The title for each system in the
Set-Up menu can be pressed, which provides the descriptions for each function of that system.
4
Engine/Trans
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen for improved
throttle response and modified shifting for an enhanced
driving experience.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Normal
• ON
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen for a balance Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
of throttle response, shift comfort and economy for steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
normal driving.
• OFF
Paddle Shifters
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel Paddle Shifters.
Paddle Shifters
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
• NORMAL
Traction
Press the “NORM” button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
4
Traction Control
• SPORT
Press the “SPORT” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Normal
Steering
Press the “Norm” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balanced steering feel and steering effort. This is also
your vehicles pre-set steering setting.
• Comfort
Press the “Comf” button on the touchscreen to provide a
lower steering effort.
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
Steering
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide an
increased amount of steering feel, requiring a higher
amount of steering effort.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
This feature allows an external USB device to be plugged
into the USB port.
The Media hub also allows the use of an SD card. For
further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement
Manual.
4
AUX/USB/SD Card Ports
1 — Aux Jack
2 — USB Port
3 — SD Card Slot
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Located on the rear of the front center console are dual STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
USB “Charge Only” ports.
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Rear USB Charging Ports
The USB “Charge Only” ports will recharge battery
operated USB devices when connected.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset button.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
AUX, etc.)
by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
The following describes the left-hand control operation in turned down or off during mobile device operation when
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect system display.
When the Uconnect system is in different modes (Radio,
Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
display.
Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If
Equipped
Uconnect Manual Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Buttons On Your Uconnect Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Buttons On Your Uconnect Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both The Buttons On
Your Faceplate And The Buttons On Your Touchscreen)
The buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
1. MAX A/C Button
Uconnect system screen.
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Uconnect 5.0 Manual Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
3. Recirculation Button
Push and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Front Defrost Button
CAUTION!
Push and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging.
5. Rear Defrost Button
Push and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes. For each additional push of
this button, five additional minutes will be added to the
timer function.
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
6. Blower Control
7. Modes
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
forced through the climate system. There are seven comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
• Panel Mode
buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted
to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
the
center
outlets
and outboard outlets can be moved
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
up
and
down
or
side to side to regulate airflow
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
direction.
There
is
a
shut off wheel located below the
control knob counterclockwise.
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
Buttons On The Touchscreen
from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
area between the icons.
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Push and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
9. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
the temperature bar button into the red area for warmer
temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX
time.
and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not
pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only
when necessary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
10. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
12. SYNC
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button into the red area for
warmer temperature settings.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same 13. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
time.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
11. Temperature Control
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to
slide the temperature bar button into the blue area for
regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
cooler temperature settings.
compartment. Moving the temperature bar into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures. Moving the tem- NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
perature bar into the blue area indicates cooler tempera- adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
tures.
time.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Dual Zone Automatic Climate Controls With
Touchscreen — If Equipped
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler Buttons On The Faceplate
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
slide the temperature bar button into the blue area for Uconnect screen.
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect system screen.
4
Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons
On The Touchscreen
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Operation Button
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
3. Recirculation Button
this function will cause the Automatic Temperature ConPress and release to change the current setting, the trol (ATC) to switch into manual mode. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
indicator illuminates when ON.
the previous setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
6. Rear Defrost Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect
8.4 Only)
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Passenger Temperature
(Uconnect 8.4 Radio Only)
Control
Down
Button 10. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower
speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds
can be selected using either the blower control knob on
the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
9. SYNC
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the control knob counterclockwise.
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize Button On The Touchscreen
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem- Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
11. Modes
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved
up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the
air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow 12. Climate Control OFF Button
from these outlets.
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
• Bi-Level Mode
ON/OFF.
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button (Uconnect NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
8.4 Only)
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera- Climate Control Functions
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
A/C (Air Conditioning)
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
temperature settings.
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
time.
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect 8.4 button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
Only)
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer tem- NOTE:
perature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if
warmer temperature settings.
needed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than Recirculation
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
MAX A/C
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor- Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
mance.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
ON.
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperaas possible.
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasfeature. Refer to the “Uconnect System Settings” in this
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
section of the manual.
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
automatically maintain that comfort level.
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
Manual Operation Override
system to function automatically.
Automatic Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Operating Tips
Vacation Storage
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
suggested control settings for various weather condi- (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
tions.
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instrucperiods, as fogging may occur.
tions.
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
these steps:
The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 5.0 or
8.4A/8.4AN system.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
4
Uconnect 5.0
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect 8.4A system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
Get Started
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
Command from current category.
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN Only: Push To Begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN
Uconnect 5.0
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, sayѧ
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
4
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
Uconnect 5.0 Radio
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your AUX or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and AUX devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to AUX
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 5.0 Media
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commandsѧ
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
button
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
Uconnect 5.0 Phone
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number>
Are you there
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
use your voice to send a text message.
steering wheel if equipped.
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
control.)
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the
beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on
the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate
navigation at any time.)
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. After
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)
WARNING!
9-1-1 Call
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
Security Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
Remote Vehicle Start**
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
Yelp Search
Remote Horn and Lights
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
WiFi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
***Extra charges apply.
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
4
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
. After
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and 1. To send a message, push the Phone button
the beep, say the following command: “Send mespress Link.
sage to John Smith.”
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
process your message.
your personalized music.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
• Once you download the app to your compatible You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
mobile device, you will also be able to start your compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any- to send a personalized text message. For details about
where.
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming TIP:
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
illuminated to use the feature.
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect to find.
Yelp
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
4
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice ComIf your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
mand.
use your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings,
set reminders, and more. For further information go to
the
Mopar
Owner
Connect
website
moparownerconnect.com.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from so you can still place a second call without being interincoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes rupted by incoming calls.
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve- NOTE:
nience there is a counter display to keep track of your
• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPmissed calls and text messages while you were using Do
hones.
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text • Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
Do Not Disturb
and send it to voicemail.
General Information
Automatic reply messages can be:
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
ters.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undetouchscreen while typing a custom message.
sired operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
NOTE:
Uconnect System Support:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) for U.S. residents call:
1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com.
Canadian residents (English) call: 1-800-465-2001 Canadian residents (French) call: 1-800-387-9983 or visit
DriveUconnect.ca.
• The term IC before the certification/registration num- Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speciSat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
fications were met.
Sun., Closed
Additional Information
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241 Please
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .417
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .417
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
䡵 AUTOSTICK .
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Operation .
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
䡵 SPORT MODE
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
CONTROL. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
— WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .414 䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED . .428
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .440
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 ELECTRIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .444
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .449
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .437
▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .437
▫ Ready Alert Braking (RAB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
▫ Rainy Brake Support (RBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .454
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .457 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .475
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .462 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .476
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .477
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .465
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ 3.6L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ 5.7L Engine — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .485
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .494
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .496
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .490
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . .
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . .
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
. . . . . . . . .497
. . . . . . . . .497
. . . . . . . . .497
. . . . . . . . .500
. . . . . . . . .501
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . . . .509
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove
the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Automatic Transmission
Keyless Enter-N-Go
The gear selector must be in the PARK position before
you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting
into any driving gear.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is
in the passenger compartment.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed
once, the DID will display a “Vehicle Not In Park”
message and the engine will remain running. Never
leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could
roll.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
4. If the shift lever/gear selector is in Neutral, push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button with the
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then push
vehicle speed below 5mph (8 km/h) before the engine
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will
OFF position.
shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector is
in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availThe ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.
If Engine Fails To Start
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
WARNING!
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
3. Push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proceThe engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and grounded, three-wire extension cord.
hold it.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located near the air box.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
WARNING! (Continued)
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST
gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn
the engine OFF, remove the key fob from the
ignition and lock your vehicle. When the ignition
is in the OFF mode, the automatic transmission is
locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
(Continued)
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display
(DID).
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Automatic Transmission Shifter
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the
shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precauNOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position of an automatic
transmission as a substitute for the parking brake.
Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK (automatic transmission).
Check by trying to move the transmission gear
selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released.
Make sure the automatic transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an
automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual
transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn
the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and
remove the ignition key. Always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode. When the
ignition is in the OFF mode, an automatic transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified dependThis range should be used for most city and highway
ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downvehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris- MANUAL (M)
tics under all normal operating conditions.
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as position) enables full manual control of transmission
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or “AutoStick” in this section for further information). Togwhile towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift gling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi- the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
Transmission Limp Home Mode
and heat buildup.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
DRIVE (D)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
operation.
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after endiagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
recur.
location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
1. Stop the vehicle.
service is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
(-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel, if
equipped) to downshift the transmission to the next
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
lower gear, or tap the lever rearward (+) (or tap the (+)
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
shift paddle, if equipped) to command an upshift.
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system paddles (+/-), if equipped, while the shift lever is in
can also provide you with more control during passing, DRIVE, will activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapcity driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, ping (-) to enter AutoStick mode will downshift the
trailer towing, and many other situations.
transmission to the next lower gear, while tapping (+) to
enter AutoStick mode will retain the current gear. The
Operation
current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster,
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the but the ⬙M⬙ will not be highlighted. The transmission will
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between revert back to normal operation (if the shift lever remains
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the in DRIVE) after a period of time, depending on accelerashift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the tor pedal activity.
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a high- In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
lighted ⬙M⬙ (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver
(using the shift lever, or the shift paddles [if equipped]),
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward
AUTOSTICK
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as described
below.
upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
• In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE),
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
display the current gear.
the transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. If the accelerator is
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
fully depressed, the transmission will downshift when
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
possible (based on current vehicle speed and gear,
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
except 6.2L and 6.4L models). Lack of accelerator pedal
vehicle is accelerated.
activity will cause the transmission to revert to automatic operation.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be
snowy or icy conditions.
maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE,
or as described below. The transmission will not • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
WARNING!
• Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if equipped), or
holding the shift lever in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the
current speed.
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when SPORT MODE — WITHOUT PERFORMANCE
AutoStick is enabled.
CONTROL
• The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode feature. This
fault or overheat condition is detected.
mode is a configuration set up for typical enthusiast
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the driving. The engine, transmission, and steering systems
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if are all set to their SPORT settings. Sport Mode will
equipped, and the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until provide improved throttle response and modified shift“D” is once again indicated in the instrument cluster. You ing for an enhanced driving experience, as well the
can shift in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time greatest amount of steering feel. This mode may be
activated and deactivated by pushing the Sport button on
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
the instrument panel switch bank.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
For vehicles equipped with Drive Modes or a “SUPER
TRACK PACK” button, refer to “Performance Control —
If Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
AWD operation could be activated by outside temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually selected by activating AutoStick mode (+/-), engaging
Sport Mode or activating the windshield wipers for an
extended period of time. Drive mode, RWD or AWD, can
be found in the Driver Information Display (DID). Refer
to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear NOTE: If the “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM” warning meswheels as necessary.
sage appears after engine start up, or during driving, it
To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati- means that the AWD system is not functioning properly
cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and and that service is required. Refer to “Driver Information
environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental Panel” for further information.
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
CAUTION!
WARNING!
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Traction
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. DRIVING THROUGH WATER
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
visible.
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
Flowing/Rising Water
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
WARNING!
sudden stop.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowthe amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im- ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
proved handling.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Shallow Standing Water
CAUTION!
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected
through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” or “Performance Control — If
Equipped” within “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
If the Electric Power Steering warning icon is
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERin tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
ING” or the “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
– SERVICE SYSTEM” message is displayed
the electric steering system experiences a fault that within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indiprevents it from providing assist, you will still have the cates the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
service. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in- — IF EQUIPPED
formation.
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
NOTE:
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and functionality after a battery disconnect.
during parking maneuvers.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever/gear
selector in the PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly press the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever/gear selector in
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift
lever/gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake
systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses
normal capability, the remaining system will still function. There will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident by increased pedal travel
during application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake Warning
Light”.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF), the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation
(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and
operating conditions (i.e., during light brake applications) this is considered normal conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Ready Alert
Braking (RAB), and Rain Brake Support (RBS).
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent
overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,
and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the
front axle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake System Warning Light
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when
the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may ABS is activated during braking when the system detects
one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such
stay on for as long as four seconds.
as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activacomes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system
tion(s).
is not functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not You also may experience the following when ABS acticome on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON vates:
position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased • The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
• Brake pedal pulsations.
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
portion of the brake system is not functioning and that
service is required. However, the conventional brake anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brakSystem Warning Light” is not on.
ing pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited
in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases
gears. The system will not activate if the transmission
the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue
is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with
to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver
a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the
will remain active.
system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will
roll down the hill as normal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing With HSA
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,
such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or
while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to other
vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain
safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back
while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may
not be enough brake pressure to hold both the
vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an
incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake
pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with the DID, perform the
following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
straight forward).
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the 3.
current setting, proceed as follows:
4.
• For vehicles equipped with the Driver Information
5.
Display (DID), refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
6.
Apply the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half
turn to the left.
Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch
bank below the climate control four times within
twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should
turn on and turn off two times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right. wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.
back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
its previous setting.
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
Traction Control System (TCS)
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. EnThis system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may maintain the desired path.
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differpath of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differenthe intended path, ESC applies the brake of the approtial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the
understeer condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon
as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS
is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC On
WARNING! (Continued)
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect
the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect
ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle
maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the
ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more
spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may
modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which
allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will
NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push
the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
will turn off.
ESC Operating Modes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
• ⬙ESC Sport⬙ and ⬙ESC Track⬙ (If equipped) are ESC
partial off mode(s).
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off – If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter
the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch
for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,
NOTE:
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
• For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a mo- “ESC OFF” message will display in the Driver Informamentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Mul- tion Display (DID). To turn ESC ON again, momentarily
tiple momentary button pushed may be required to push the “ESC Off” switch.
return to ESC On.
NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if position. It should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on
equipped.
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
WARNING!
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
reduction and stability features are disabled. 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency
evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loto assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
NOTE:
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
that caused the ESC activation.
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects
or other vehicles.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
customer has elected to have the Electronic NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control
Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.
(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the
available ESC modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Rainy Brake Support (RBS)
Rainy Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When Rainy Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
the weight referenced here.
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [294 kg]).
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occubeing loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
capacity calculated in step 4.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
(392 kg).
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Economy
(Continued)
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Fuel Economy
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
NOTE:
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
Tire Repair
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
meets the following criteria:
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
handling of your vehicle.
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
WARNING!
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
Snow Tires
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informaSome areas of the country require the use of snow tires
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
If you need snow tires, select tires
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
equivalent in size and type to the origiadversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediand traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro- It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
checked before using these tire types.
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
tire rotation pattern.
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipwheel equivalent in look and function to the original
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Tire Spinning
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivaWARNING!
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
You could lose control and have a collision resulting Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
in serious injury or death.
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little this manual for more information relating to the Load
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
– All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
– Original equipment P235/55R19, 235/55R19 tire
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
with a S Class traction device or equivalent.
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• Due to limited clearance, the following traction devices are recommended:
– Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
– Original equipment P215/65R17, P225/ 60R18, or
P235/55R18 tire with a Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or
equivalent.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased presThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
sure.
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warnthree hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illunot exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to “TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will autoproperly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will matically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard presabove 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive sure value.
this information.
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light”.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to and to maintain the proper pressure.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each The TPMS consists of the following components:
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
• Receiver module,
readings to the receiver module.
• Four TPM sensors,
Premium System
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the Drivers Information
Display (DID) will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the
low tire pressure values shown in a different color.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition
(those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically update, the
graphic display in the DID will return the pressure values
shown to their original color, and the “TPM Telltale
Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for
the TPMS to receive this information.
DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer flash,
and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following:
NOTE: When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (30 kPa)
above the recommended cold placard pressure in order
the TPM sensors.
to turn the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light off.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
Service TPMS Warning
materials that may block radio wave signals.
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
wheel housings.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the compact spare tire.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn- 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of
display the low pressure values in a different color.
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
addition, the DID will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
TPMS to receive this information.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
General Information
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and 3.6L Engine — If Equipped
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
This engine is designed to meet all emis(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us(2) This device must accept any interference received,
ing high-quality unleaded “Regular” gasoincluding interference that may cause undesired operaline having an octane rating of 87 as specition.
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved “Premium” gasoline will not provide any benefit over
by the party responsible for compliance could void the “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of
87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not
a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considThis engine is designed to meet all emisering service for the vehicle.
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us- Reformulated Gasoline
ing high-quality unleaded gasoline having Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
an octane range of 87 to 89 as specified by burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gaso- Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are speline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imeconomy.
prove air quality.
5.7L Engine — If Equipped
While operating on gasoline with an octane number of The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide ima cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard proved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
genates such as ethanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 15% ethanol (E-15).
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
Materials Added To Fuel
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel
vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a
unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or
Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please
refer to the other sections of this manual for information
on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Fuel Requirements
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a
yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.
For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating
between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%
When switching fuel types:
unleaded gasoline.
• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit or products that can cause spark in or
near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube
cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a
cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.
• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
least 5 miles (8 km).
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that
engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and
contains additional requirements, developed during exrough idle following start up may be experienced even
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
if the above recommendations are followed, especially
FCA US LLC engines.
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
Starting
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time
additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
may be used.
until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuimprove engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
NOTE:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Cruising Range
Maintenance
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be
experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per
liter and the driving range will decrease by approximately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect drivability.
Replacement Parts
5
All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel
Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.
Ethanol compatible service components are required.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Maintain nozzle in filler for 5 seconds to allow nozzle
to drain.
Fuel Funnel
CAUTION!
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Follow the steps below to open the fuel door in case of an
emergency:
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release located in the trunk.
Access Cover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
3. Pull the release cable.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Release Cable
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
VEHICLE LOADING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
• Type of Vehicle
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
indicated.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
it is not over the GVWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
rear GAWR.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
WARNING!
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Loading
TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
NOTE:
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GAWRs.
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
tire pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
further information.
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle CertificaThe GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
tion Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or teminformation.
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition.
WARNING!
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
Tongue Weight (TW)
and trailer when weighed in combination.
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of
the load on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Frontal Area
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the A weight-distributing system works by applying levermaximum width of the front of a trailer.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
Trailer Sway Control
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it proinstalled between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
swaying motions while traveling.
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4 535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer
Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
3.6L Automatic
5.7L Automatic
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Weight)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
32 sq ft (2.97 sq m)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Frontal Area
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Max. Tongue Weight
(See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consider the following items when computing the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Towing Requirements
WARNING! (Continued)
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury collision.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
(Continued)
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard.
2. GTW
Towing Requirements — Tires
3. GAWR
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on tire pressures and for proper
tire inflation procedures.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
brake controller is not required.
Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on tread wear indicators and for the proper • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
inspection procedure.
1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information
WARNING!
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
and GAWR limits.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addiThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
personal injury.
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
collision.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles 2 — Male Pin
wiring harness.
3 — Ground
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you can use the
AutoStick shift control (if equipped) select a lower gear.
Seven-Pin Connector
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
• To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as neces• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
sary to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to
a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
conditions allow.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Cooling System
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to To reduce potential for engine and transmission overmaximize fuel efficiency.
heating, take the following actions:
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
AutoStick
City Driving
• When using the AutoStick shift control, select the
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transhighest gear that allows for adequate performance and
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose “5” if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or Highway Driving
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a tow dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .513 䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .525
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .529
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .535
▫ Jacking And Changing A Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
512 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models . . . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models . . . . . . . . . .546
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 513
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning • On the highways — slow down.
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
an impending overheat condition:
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
from the engine cooling system.
may wear down your battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
514 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 515
6
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
516 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 517
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
6
Opening The Access Panel
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the spare tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
518 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
Jack Fastener
6. Remove the jack and lug wrench assembly from under
the spare tire. Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen
the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from the jack
assembly.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 519
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Jacking And Changing A Tire
3. Set the parking brake.
WARNING!
4. Place the gear selector into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire,
block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE or FIRST gear.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
6
520 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the lug nuts, use the lug wrench to pry the
center cap off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to
loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
Jack Warning Label
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 521
NOTE: If the vehicle is too low for jack placement, slide
the jack on its side and rotate it up into position.
6
Jacking Locations
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill
flange.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Front Jacking Location
522 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 523
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires—General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
524 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack 2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
handle counterclockwise.
lug nuts.
10. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
WARNING!
11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
of the jack faces the front of the vehicle before
tightening down the fastener.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to Torque Specifications for proper lug nut
torque.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 525
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Tire Service Kit Storage
Description
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g.,
screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to
approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
6
Tire Service Kit Location
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on
the bottom side of the Tire
Service Kit)
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
6
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
valve stem.
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
before proceeding.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
nails) from the tire.
in the OFF position.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
4. Set the parking brake.
Deflated Tire:
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the gear selector in NEUTRAL.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
use. Call for assistance.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
tire.
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
empty.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi- 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes:
hicle.”
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Mode position.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and loading information label on the driver-side door
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posopening.
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authomended inflation pressure before continuing.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
Volt outlet.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
the vehicle.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
service center.
of it accordingly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the precautions.
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
CAUTION!
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and place the ignition in the OFF position.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the dis5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
charged battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
in the reverse sequence:
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
CAUTION!
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
with the discharged battery.
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
you should have the battery and charging system in- front wheels. Push and hold the lock button on the gear
spected at your authorized dealer.
selector. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and
REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
wheels or racing the engine.
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” in your Owner’s
NOTE: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
Manual on the DVD for further information. Once the
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL for
restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
more than 2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead battery),
a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
2. Remove the console storage bin.
Console Storage Bin
3. Remove plastic cover under the bin by using the slot
provided to access the Manual Park Release lever.
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console
base.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Locking Tab
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
6. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged To Reset The Manual Park Release:
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
rearward, until it locks in place in the vertical position.
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be moved.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is 2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the Manual Park Release cover and the
console storage bin.
Tether Strap
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
The Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front
Flatbed
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max distance
NOT RECOMMENDED (but, if
used, same limitations as above)
NOT RECOMMENDED
ALL
BEST METHOD
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED, but, if used:
• Ignition in ON/RUN position
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
(NOT in Park)
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to ⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK
for towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models
CAUTION! (Continued)
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, AWD
models can also be towed with the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, the transmission in NEUTRAL (not
in PARK!), and the rear wheels OFF the ground with no
limitation on speed or distance. Since the ignition MUST
be in the ON/RUN position to tow in this manner, AWD
vehicles must be towed with ALL FOUR wheels OFF the
ground (e.g. on a flatbed truck) if the Key Fob is
unavailable.
CAUTION!
• Towing this vehicle using any other method can cause
severe transmission and/or transfer case damage.
• Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Rear-Wheel Drive (RWD) Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. Refer to
⬙Manual Park Release⬙ in this section for instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL when the
engine is off.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). Without The Key Fob
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of towing
is with a flatbed truck.
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the Key Fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .552
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .554
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .558
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . .583
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And
Park/Turn Lamp — Models With High
Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . .609
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .609
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .591
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .597
▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .610
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Fluid Capacities — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Engine — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
▫ Fluid Capacities — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
▫ Engine — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)”. It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
WARNING!
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your Own• ONLY an authorized service technician should con- er’s Manual on the DVD.
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the PROGRAMS
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
tracking device, it may:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
For states that require an Inspection and Mainteloss of vehicle control could occur that may result
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
sonal information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace- • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
not proceed to the I/M station.
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
not crank or start the engine.
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light you may need to do nothing more than drive your
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
check.
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready
or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
CAUTION! (Continued)
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
regular intervals, such as once a month. The best time to
fully warmed engine is shut off.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
liter) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
“SAFE” range will result in an oil level at the top of the
dipstick. Adding 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of oil when the
“SAFE” range on these engines.
reading is at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading
on these engines.
Checking Oil Level — 3.6L Engine
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intermanufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
API Certified engine oils.
350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 enconcern for fleet customers.
gine oils.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Viscosity — 5.7L Engine
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting
and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix
or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil
meeting MS-6395 is not available.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
ber should not be used.
should not be used.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomstation or governmental agency for advice on how and
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
your area.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte- The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Battery Location
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Air Conditioner Maintenance
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a
low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the
manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service
be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Access Door
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
A/C Air Filter
Filter Access Cover
5. Close the filter access cover.
3. Remove the used filter.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the maintenance intervals.
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small performance of blades may be present with chattering,
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesCylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
sary.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gallon (4 liters) of
washer fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid”
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
appears in the Driver Information Display (DID).
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
WARNING!
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the Commercially available windshield washer solvents
residual water.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
Adding Washer Fluid
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING! (Continued)
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
(Continued)
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic conmotion.
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCoolant Checks
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
CAUTION!
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
WARNING!
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
local authorized dealer.
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomoverheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
WARNING! (Continued)
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezshould be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
ing.
Points To Remember
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporMS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Brake System
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake if the brake system warning light indicates system failsystem components should be inspected periodically. ure.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when permaintenance intervals.
forming underhood services.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
WARNING! (Continued)
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only
the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Automatic Transmission
Special Additives
Selection Of Lubricant
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
may adversely affect seals.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure
optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid
specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid Level Check
Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the disassembled for any reason.
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped
Rear Axle
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
front differential. The exterior surface of these components should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informathe middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The tion.
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. Fluid Level Check
Use this plug to add fluid as required.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer cover axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differential hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level should be Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
even with or slightly below the bottom of the hole.
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Changes
Change Axle Fluid
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
maintenance intervals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed.
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish.
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
clean damp cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win- 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Seat Belt Maintenance
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR Total Clean, a mild
directly on the mirror.
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Glass Surfaces
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
WARNING! (Continued)
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed
on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
7
Front Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
(Continued)
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
Mini-Fuse
–
–
3
50 Amp Red
–
4
30 Amp Pink
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 –
(Non 6.2L Supercharged)
Electric Power Steering #1 –
If Equipped / Radiator Fan
(6.2L Supercharged) – If Equipped
Starter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Cavity
5
6
7
8
9
10
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
–
–
–
–
–
–
50 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
Police Ignition Run / ACC #1
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security – If Equipped / Under hood
Lamp – Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 –
(Non 6.2L Supercharged)
7
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
19
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
20
21
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue –
Police
40 Amp Green /
20 Amp Blue –
Police
20 Amp Blue
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
22
23
24
28
29
–
–
–
–
15 Amp Blue
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Electric Power Steering #2 –
If Equipped / Radiator Fan
(6.2L Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed #2
Engine Cooling Pump
(6.2L Supercharged) /
Police Bat Feed # 3
Police Bat Feed # 1
Police Ignition Run/ACC Feed # 3
Fuse – Spare
Transmission Control Module
(Challenger/Charger Police) /
Electronic Shift Module (Challenger)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Cavity
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
38
39
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller / Rad Fan Relays
(Charger/300) / Electric Power Steering
Module (Charger/300) / Fuel Pump
Relay (Charger/300) / 5–Speed
Airbag Module
EPS (Challenger) / EHPS (Police)/AC
Clutch Relay / Vacuum Pump Relay /
Fuel Pump Relay (Challenger) /
Rad Fan Relays (Challenger)
7
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
48
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
49
50
51
52
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
53
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
AWD Module (Charger/300) /
Front Axle Disconnect (Charger/300) /
Adaptive Cruise (Challenger) – If
Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise (Charger/300) –
If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays. Fuse cavity location and descriptions are printed on the inside of the power distribution center cover.
7
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
Opening The Access Cover
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Continued)
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
(Continued)
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue – Police
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof/Dome Lamp –
Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Cavity
8
9
10
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
11
30 Amp Pink
–
12
–
20 Amp Yellow
15
16
17
18
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
19
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control
Module
Passenger Door Control
Module
Dual USB Center Console
Rear/Cigar Lighter IP –
If Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
Mod Network Interface –
Police
Fuse – Spare
7
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
20
21
22
23
Cartridge Fuse
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red
24
25
26
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
27
31
–
–
25 Amp Clear
25 Amp Breaker
32
–
15 Amp Blue
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Fuel Door/Diagnostic
Port
Integrated Center Stack
Tire Pressure Monitor
Cygnus Transmission
Module (Charger/300)/
Electronic Shift Module
(Charger/300)
Amplifier – If Equipped
Power Seats –
If Equipped
HVAC Module/Cluster
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Cavity
33
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
34
–
10 Amp Red
35
36
–
–
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
37
38
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
40
41
42
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Ignition Switch/RF Hub
Module/Steering
Column Lock (300) –
If Equipped
Steering Column
Module/Clock (300)
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve
– If Equipped
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm
Rest/Console Media Hub
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
7
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
43
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
44
–
10 Amp Red
45
–
15 Amp Blue
46
47
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
48
–
20 Amp Yellow
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Comfort Seat And
Steering Wheel Module
(Heated Steering
Wheel/RR Heated Seats)
Park Assist / Blind Spot
/ Rear View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror / Compass (Charger/
300) / Humidity Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting
/ Auto High BEAM /
Day Time Running
Lamps – If Equipped
Active Suspension –
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Cavity
49
50
51
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
52
–
10 Amp Red
53
–
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
58
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated Seats –
If Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear
Heated Seat Switches –
If Equipped
HVAC Module/In Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
59
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
60
–
5 Amp Tan
61
62
63
64
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Breaker
65
66
67
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
10 Amp Red
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
Description
Adjustable Pedals –
Police
Heated Washer Nozzles
(Charger)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Windows
(Charger/300)
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Rain and Light Sensor /
Sunroof / Inside RR View
Mirror / Power Outlet Illumination (Center Console)
/ Police Run Acc Relay
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Cavity
68
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
69
70
–
–
–
–
Description
Dual USB Power Outlet –
R/A Sense (Charger/300)
Rear Sunshade
(Charger/300)
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
battery.
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
VEHICLE STORAGE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Compartment Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cup Holder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
9005SL+
Low/High Beam Headlamp
(Standard Halogen Bi Function Projector)
Low/High Beam Headlamp – High Intensity
Discharge (Premium HID Bi Function Projector)
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If Equipped
Front Side Marker
Rear Tail Lamp
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
License
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced
(Serviced
at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized
at Authorized
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
Dealer)
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
CAUTION!
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
1. Open the hood.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp 5. Reinstall the dust cap.
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Remove the large dust cap from the headlamp housing by turning it counterclockwise, turn the bulb
counterclockwise and remove.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID)
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
The Side Markers use LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lamp
The Front Fog Lamps use LED sources that are not
serviceable separately. The Front Fog Lamp must be
replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
The Backup Lamps use LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The Applique must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The CHMSL Lamp uses LED sources that are not serviceable separately. The CHMSL Lamp must be replaced as
an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp uses an LED source that is not
serviceable separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fluid Capacities — 3.6L
Fuel (Approximate)
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol or up to 85% Ethanol for Flex Fuel
(E-85) Engine
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
69.9 Liters
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
7
10 Quarts
9.5 Liters
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Capacities — 5.7L
Fuel (Approximate)
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol
Engine Oil With Filter
SAE 5W-20, API Certified
Cooling System*
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent – without Severe Duty II Cooling System
MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent – with Severe Duty II Cooling System
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
U.S.
Metric
18.5 Gallons
69.9 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.9 Liters
15 Quarts
14.3 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
CAUTION! (Continued)
Important Information
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine — 3.6L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
87 Octane, Up to 85% Ethanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Engine — 5.7L
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil, and
Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use a MOPAR Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
89 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable,
0-15% Ethanol.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission — 8-Speed Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Transfer Case
Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic
Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the
correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and
SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear
Lubricant SAE 75W90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR OD Synthetic Gear
Lubricant SAE 75W85 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use MOPAR Transfer Case
Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .620
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
618 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
The “Oil Change Required” message will be displayed in
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
oil change is necessary.
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
scheduled maintenance.
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serreferring to the steps described under “Driver Informavice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
tion Dispay (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
Panel” for further information.
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interquired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 concern for fleet customers.
miles (805 km).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 619
Severe Duty All Models
Required Maintenance Intervals:
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is page for the required maintenance intervals.
operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Change Indicator System:
Duty.
• Change oil and filter
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular
wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled
• Check engine oil level.
service
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, • Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
and park brake
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake • Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
master cylinder, and power steering (if equipped) and • Inspect exhaust system
fill as needed.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
8
620 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals,
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle
fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary.
Adjust park brake on vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
Inspect transfer case fluid (All Wheel Drive Only).
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Maintenance Chart
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace cabin/air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs.**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
Inspect the transfer case fluid. Change the transfer
case fluid; if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing. (All Wheel Drive Only).
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 621
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
X
X
X
8
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Change the rear axle fluid and on models
equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent
trailer towing.
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
X
X
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .627
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .628
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .628
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .629
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .632
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
626 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .633
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 627
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
628 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423-6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 629
In Mexico Contact
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
Tel.: (787) 782-5757
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Service Contract
Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
630 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
MOPAR PARTS
WARRANTY INFORMATION
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans- complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and and/or components is written in straightforward lanRecalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
roadsafety/
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting,
operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well
as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal
safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
9
634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
636 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434, 436
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .180
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Adjust
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62, 64
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 101, 268
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .563
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364, 370
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 567
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips. . . . . . . . . . .379, 381
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . .565, 566, 567
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . .364, 378, 565
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 637
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 271
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
All Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428, 583
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574, 611
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . .364, 370, 378
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417, 582
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582, 613, 616
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581, 582
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 616
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .423
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
AWD
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 616
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
638 INDEX
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .99
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273, 563 Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606, 608
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .24 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 606
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457 Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 616 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 488
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436, 579 Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579, 613, 616 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 436 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .555
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 616
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 639
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .91
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .84
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .80
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .361
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .576
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573, 577
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
640 INDEX
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574, 611, 613, 614, 615
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 294
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 590
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .309, 311
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .34
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 30
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 301
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 301
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 641
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .591
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . .176, 177, 180
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .275
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 537
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .555
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552, 553
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .573, 613, 614, 615
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 488
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
642 INDEX
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 537
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559, 611, 613, 614, 615
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 611
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 488
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 488
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 570
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 567
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562, 613, 614, 615
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 160, 291
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488, 489
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 643
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 616
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .613
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485, 488
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483, 613, 614, 615
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 614, 615
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .232, 239
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496, 498
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496, 497
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
644 INDEX
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .160
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 168
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 145
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 145
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .160
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 113
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . .261, 264, 272, 277, 288, 291
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 645
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .587
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 411
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 318, 335
iPod/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .35, 318, 335
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Jump Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 537
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24 Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
646 INDEX
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 606
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 154
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73, 101, 268
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269, 436
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292, 294
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .159, 160
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154, 609
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 168
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .279
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .164
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161, 230
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 647
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606, 608
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .283, 477
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 159, 160, 291
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .272, 291
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495, 497
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .279, 555
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 113
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
648 INDEX
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557, 631
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560, 611
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561, 611
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 632
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . .483, 613, 614, 615
Oil, Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298, 559, 613, 614, 615
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562, 613, 614, 615 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 649
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .458
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .245
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Seats
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 616
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309, 311
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .576
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .16, 18, 26, 30, 40
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
650 INDEX
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Rear Wheel Drive
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566, 567
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 24
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .362
Remote Starting
Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . .337
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 651
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557 Seat Belt
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .56
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .59
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 145
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
RWD
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 101
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .56
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
652 INDEX
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 51, 54
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 135, 137, 139
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 135
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143, 145
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137, 139
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 271
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . .613, 614, 615
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 160, 291
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 653
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469, 470, 516
Spark Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 614, 615
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 614, 615
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613, 614, 615
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 179
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . .176, 177, 180
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 410
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 171
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 171
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .362
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379, 605
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .62
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
654 INDEX
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 171
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC). . . . . . .370, 378
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170, 171
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .457, 458
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103, 462, 469, 633
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 524
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462, 469
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516, 518
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457, 458
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473, 524
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 462
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469, 470, 516
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Wheel Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .524
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . .525, 526, 527, 529, 530, 533, 534
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 655
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .509
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583, 613, 616
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415, 417, 581
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581, 613, 616
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .21
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 47
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160, 291
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
Uconnect
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .337
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
10
656 INDEX
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 337
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 23, 33
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .35, 318, 335
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .35, 318, 335
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 335
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .361
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458, 495, 497
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379, 605
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166, 570
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 243
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INDEX 657
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165, 166
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16JC49-126-AA
16D481-126-AB
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby:
First Edition
Second
Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement